blob: ff68b8c4ab35164ff235bb89101fbb042c8dd954 [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07008 *
9 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
10 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
11 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
12 */
13
14#ifndef MAC80211_H
15#define MAC80211_H
16
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050017#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070018#include <linux/kernel.h>
19#include <linux/if_ether.h>
20#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070021#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070022#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +020023#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070024
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040025/**
26 * DOC: Introduction
27 *
28 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
29 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
30 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
31 * drivers.
32 */
33
34/**
35 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
36 *
37 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070038 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
39 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
40 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010041 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
42 * tasklet function.
43 *
44 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070045 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070046 */
47
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040048/**
49 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070050 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040051 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
52 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
53 */
54
55/**
56 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070057 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040058 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
59 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
60 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
61 * hardware.
62 *
63 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
64 *
65 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
66 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
67 *
68 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
69 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070070 */
71
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020072/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040073 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
74 *
75 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
76 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
77 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
78 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
79 *
80 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
81 * suspend.
82 *
83 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
84 *
85 */
86
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +010087/**
88 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
89 *
90 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
91 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
92 * between different stations/interfaces.
93 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
94 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
95 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
96 *
97 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
98 * driver operation.
99 *
100 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with a
101 * single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
102 *
103 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
104 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
105 *
106 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame, it calls
107 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it
108 * calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
109 *
110 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
111 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
112 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
113 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
114 * .release_buffered_frames().
115 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
116 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
117 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
118 */
119
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -0500120struct device;
121
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -0400122/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200123 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
124 *
125 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100126 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200127 */
128enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200129 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100130 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200131};
132
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200133#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
134
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200135/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800136 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
137 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
138 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
139 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
140 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
141 */
142enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
143 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
144 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
145 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
146 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
147};
Johannes Berg948d8872011-09-29 16:04:29 +0200148#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800149
150/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400151 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
152 *
153 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100154 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400155 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400156 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200157 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
158 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400159 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100160 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300161 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200162 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400163 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700164struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200165 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100166 u16 cw_min;
167 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200168 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300169 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200170 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700171};
172
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700173struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
174 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
175 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
176 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
177 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
178};
179
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100180/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200181 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100182 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200183 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100184 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200185 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
186 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200187 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200188 */
189enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100190 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200191 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100192 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200193 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200194 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200195};
196
197/**
198 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
199 *
200 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
201 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
202 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100203 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200204 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200205 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
206 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
207 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
208 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100209 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100210 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200211 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
212 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
213 */
214struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100215 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200216 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200217
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200218 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
219
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100220 bool radar_enabled;
221
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100222 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200223};
224
225/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300226 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
227 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
228 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
229 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
230 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
231 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
232 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
233 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
234 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
235 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
236 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
237 * for changes/removal.)
238 */
239enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
240 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
241 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
242};
243
244/**
245 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
246 *
247 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
248 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
249 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
250 * done.
251 *
252 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
253 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
254 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
255 */
256struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
257 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
258 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
259 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
260};
261
262/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100263 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
264 *
265 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
266 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
267 *
268 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
269 * also implies a change in the AID.
270 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
271 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300272 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700273 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200274 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200275 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200276 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
277 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
278 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
279 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
280 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
281 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200282 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200283 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300284 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200285 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
286 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200287 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200288 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200289 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300290 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200291 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100292 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
293 * changed (currently only in P2P client mode, GO mode will be later)
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300294 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
295 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100296 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
297 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
298 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100299 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100300 */
301enum ieee80211_bss_change {
302 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
303 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
304 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300305 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200306 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200307 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200308 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200309 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
310 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
311 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200312 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200313 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300314 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200315 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200316 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300317 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200318 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300319 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200320 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100321 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300322 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100323 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100324 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200325
326 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100327};
328
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300329/*
330 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
331 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
332 * filtering will be disabled.
333 */
334#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
335
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100336/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200337 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
338 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200339 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300340 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300341 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
342 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
343 * once each time the timeout triggers.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700344 */
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200345enum ieee80211_event_type {
346 RSSI_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200347 MLME_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300348 BAR_RX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300349 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200350};
351
352/**
353 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
354 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
355 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
356 */
357enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700358 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
359 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
360};
361
362/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200363 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200364 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
365 */
366struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
367 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
368};
369
370/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200371 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
372 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200373 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200374 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
375 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200376 */
377enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
378 AUTH_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200379 ASSOC_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200380 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
381 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200382};
383
384/**
385 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
386 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
387 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
388 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
389 */
390enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
391 MLME_SUCCESS,
392 MLME_DENIED,
393 MLME_TIMEOUT,
394};
395
396/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200397 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200398 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
399 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
400 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
401 */
402struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
403 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
404 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
405 u16 reason;
406};
407
408/**
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300409 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
410 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
411 * @tid: the tid
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300412 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300413 */
414struct ieee80211_ba_event {
415 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
416 u16 tid;
417 u16 ssn;
418};
419
420/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200421 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200422 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200423 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200424 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300425 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300426 * @u:union holding the fields above
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200427 */
428struct ieee80211_event {
429 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
430 union {
431 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200432 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300433 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200434 } u;
435};
436
437/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100438 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
439 *
440 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
441 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
442 *
443 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200444 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
445 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530446 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100447 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
448 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Bergea1b2b452015-06-02 20:15:49 +0200449 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
450 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100451 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200452 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300453 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200454 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100455 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
456 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
457 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
458 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200459 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200460 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
461 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200462 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100463 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
464 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200465 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
466 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
467 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700468 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800469 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200470 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
471 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
472 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300473 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100474 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200475 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
476 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100477 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
478 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100479 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200480 * This field is only valid when the channel type is one of the HT types.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200481 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
482 * implies disabled
483 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300484 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
485 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
486 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
487 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100488 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
489 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
490 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200491 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200492 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
493 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
494 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300495 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
496 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200497 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300498 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
499 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200500 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100501 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
502 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
503 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
504 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
505 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
506 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100507 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100508 */
509struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200510 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100511 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200512 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530513 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100514 u16 aid;
515 /* erp related data */
516 bool use_cts_prot;
517 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300518 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200519 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800520 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700521 u16 beacon_int;
522 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200523 u64 sync_tsf;
524 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100525 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100526 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300527 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100528 int mcast_rate[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200529 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200530 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
531 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100532 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300533 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100534 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200535 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200536 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300537 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300538 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
539 size_t ssid_len;
540 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200541 int txpower;
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100542 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100543 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100544};
545
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800546/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200547 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800548 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700549 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800550 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100551 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200552 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
553 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
554 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
555 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
556 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
557 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
558 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
559 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
560 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
561 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
562 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200563 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200564 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
565 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200566 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200567 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
568 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200569 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200570 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200571 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
572 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
573 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
574 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
575 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
576 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
577 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
578 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200579 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
580 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
581 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300582 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
583 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200584 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
585 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
586 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600587 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
588 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
589 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100590 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
591 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
592 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200593 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
594 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200595 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
596 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100597 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
598 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
599 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200600 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
601 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
602 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
603 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100604 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
605 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
606 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100607 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
608 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
609 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200610 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
611 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
612 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400613 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200614 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
615 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100616 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
617 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
618 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
619 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200620 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
621 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
622 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530623 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
624 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
625 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200626 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
627 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
628 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200629 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
630 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530631 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
632 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
633 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200634 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
635 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
636 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530637 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
638 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
639 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
640 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
641 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200642 *
643 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
644 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800645 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200646enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200647 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200648 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
649 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
650 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
651 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
652 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
653 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
654 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
655 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
656 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
657 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
658 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
659 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600660 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100661 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200662 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200663 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100664 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200665 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100666 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100667 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200668 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400669 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200670 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100671 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200672 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530673 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200674 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530675 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200676 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530677 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200678};
679
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200680#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
681
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200682/**
683 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
684 *
685 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
686 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530687 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
688 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200689 *
690 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
691 */
692enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
693 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530694 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200695};
696
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200697/*
698 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
699 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
700 */
701#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
702 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
703 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
704 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
705 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100706 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200707 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200708 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200709
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530710/**
711 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
712 * Rate Control algorithm.
713 *
714 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
715 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
716 *
717 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
718 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
719 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
720 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
721 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100722 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
723 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530724 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
725 * Greenfield mode.
726 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100727 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
728 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
729 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530730 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
731 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
732 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
733 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
734 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200735enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
736 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
737 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
738 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
739
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100740 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200741 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
742 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
743 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
744 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
745 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100746 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
747 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
748 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800749};
750
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200751
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200752/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
753#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200754
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200755/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
756#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
757
758/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200759#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200760
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200761/* maximum number of rate table entries */
762#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
763
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200764/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200765 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200766 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200767 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
768 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200769 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200770 *
771 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
772 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
773 *
774 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
775 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200776 *
777 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
778 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
779 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
780 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
781 * information
782 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
783 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
784 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
785 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
786 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
787 * information should then contain
788 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
789 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
790 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200791 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200792struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
793 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100794 u16 count:5,
795 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000796} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200797
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100798#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
799
800static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
801 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
802{
803 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200804 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
805 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100806}
807
808static inline u8
809ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
810{
811 return rate->idx & 0xF;
812}
813
814static inline u8
815ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
816{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200817 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100818}
819
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200820/**
821 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200822 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200823 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
824 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
825 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
826 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
827 *
828 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200829 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200830 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100831 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700832 * @control: union for control data
833 * @status: union for status data
834 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100835 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700836 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100837 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700838 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200839 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200840 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200841struct ieee80211_tx_info {
842 /* common information */
843 u32 flags;
844 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200845
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200846 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100847
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100848 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100849
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200850 union {
851 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200852 union {
853 /* rate control */
854 struct {
855 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
856 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
857 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200858 u8 use_rts:1;
859 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200860 u8 short_preamble:1;
861 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200862 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200863 };
864 /* only needed before rate control */
865 unsigned long jiffies;
866 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200867 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200868 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
869 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200870 u32 flags;
871 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200872 } control;
873 struct {
Johannes Berg3b79af92015-06-01 23:14:59 +0200874 u64 cookie;
875 } ack;
876 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200877 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200878 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200879 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100880 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200881 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300882 u16 tx_time;
883 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200884 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200885 struct {
886 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
887 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200888 u8 pad[4];
889
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200890 void *rate_driver_data[
891 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
892 };
893 void *driver_data[
894 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200895 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700896};
897
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300898/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200899 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
900 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200901 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
902 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
903 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200904 *
905 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
906 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
907 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
908 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
909 */
910struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
911 const u8 *ies[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
912 size_t len[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
913 const u8 *common_ies;
914 size_t common_ie_len;
915};
916
917
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200918static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
919{
920 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
921}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400922
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200923static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
924{
925 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
926}
927
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200928/**
929 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
930 *
931 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
932 *
933 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
934 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
935 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
936 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
937 *
938 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
939 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
940 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
941 */
942static inline void
943ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
944{
945 int i;
946
947 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
948 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
949 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
950 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
951 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
952 /* clear the rate counts */
953 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
954 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
955
956 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200957 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200958 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
959 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
960 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
961}
962
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400963
964/**
965 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
966 *
967 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
968 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
969 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
970 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400971 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
972 * verification has been done by the hardware.
973 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
974 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
975 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -0400976 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
977 * the frame.
978 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
979 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800980 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +0100981 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
982 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
983 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800984 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
985 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
986 * (including FCS) was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +0200987 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200988 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100989 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200990 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
991 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +0100992 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
993 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +0200994 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
995 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
996 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200997 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
998 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
999 * each A-MPDU
1000 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN: driver reports 0-length subframes
1001 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN: This is a zero-length subframe, for
1002 * monitoring purposes only
1003 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1004 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1005 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1006 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1007 * on this subframe
1008 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1009 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001010 * @RX_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001011 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001012 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
1013 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001014 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1015 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1016 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1017 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1018 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1019 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1020 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1021 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1022 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001023 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1024 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1025 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001026 */
1027enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001028 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1029 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
1030 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1031 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1032 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1033 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001034 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001035 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
1036 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
1037 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
1038 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
1039 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
1040 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
1041 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
1042 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN = BIT(15),
1043 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN = BIT(16),
1044 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
1045 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
1046 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
1047 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001048 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001049 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001050 RX_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(23),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001051 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001052 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
1053 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001054 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001055 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(31),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001056};
1057
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001058#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
1059
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001060/**
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001061 * enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags - receive VHT flags
1062 *
1063 * These flags are used with the @vht_flag member of
1064 * &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1065 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001066 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +02001067 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001068 */
1069enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags {
1070 RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergf89903d2015-01-15 16:02:46 +01001071 RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(1),
1072 RX_VHT_FLAG_BF = BIT(2),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001073};
1074
1075/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001076 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1077 *
1078 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1079 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001080 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001081 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +09001082 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1083 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001084 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1085 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001086 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001087 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001088 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1089 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1090 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001091 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1092 * values were filled.
1093 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1094 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001095 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001096 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001097 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1098 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001099 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_*
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001100 * @vht_flag: %RX_VHT_FLAG_*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +02001101 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001102 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1103 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1104 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001105 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001106struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1107 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001108 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001109 u32 ampdu_reference;
1110 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001111 u16 freq;
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001112 u8 vht_flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001113 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001114 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001115 u8 rx_flags;
1116 u8 band;
1117 u8 antenna;
1118 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001119 u8 chains;
1120 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001121 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001122};
1123
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001124/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001125 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1126 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1127 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1128 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1129 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1130 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1131 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1132 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1133 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1134 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1135 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1136 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1137 * @data field.
1138 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1139 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1140 * length
1141 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1142 *
1143 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1144 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1145 * data.
1146 */
1147struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1148 u32 present;
1149 u8 align;
1150 u8 oui[3];
1151 u8 subns;
1152 u8 pad;
1153 u16 len;
1154 u8 data[];
1155} __packed;
1156
1157/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001158 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1159 *
1160 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1161 *
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001162 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1163 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1164 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001165 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1166 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1167 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1168 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1169 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1170 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1171 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001172 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1173 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1174 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1175 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1176 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001177 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1178 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001179 */
1180enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001181 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001182 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001183 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001184 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001185};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001186
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001187
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001188/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001189 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1190 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001191 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001192 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001193 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001194 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001195 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001196 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001197 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001198 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001199 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1200 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001201 */
1202enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001203 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001204 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001205 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001206 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001207 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1208 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1209 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001210 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001211};
1212
1213/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001214 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1215 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001216 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1217 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1218 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1219 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1220 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001221 */
1222enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1223 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1224 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1225 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1226 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1227
1228 /* keep last */
1229 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1230};
1231
1232/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001233 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1234 *
1235 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1236 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001237 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1238 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001239 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001240 * @max_sleep_period: the maximum number of beacon intervals to sleep for
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001241 * before checking the beacon for a TIM bit (managed mode only); this
1242 * value will be only achievable between DTIM frames, the hardware
1243 * needs to check for the multicast traffic bit in DTIM beacons.
1244 * This variable is valid only when the CONF_PS flag is set.
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001245 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1246 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1247 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001248 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1249 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1250 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1251 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001252 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1253 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001254 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001255 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001256 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001257 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001258 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001259 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1260 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001261 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001262 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1263 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001264 *
1265 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1266 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001267 * configured for an HT channel.
1268 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1269 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001270 */
1271struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001272 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001273 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001274 int max_sleep_period;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001275
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001276 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001277 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001278
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001279 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1280
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001281 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001282 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001283 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001284};
1285
1286/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001287 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1288 *
1289 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1290 * operation.
1291 *
1292 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1293 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1294 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1295 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001296 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1297 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001298 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1299 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001300 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001301 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1302 */
1303struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1304 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001305 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001306 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001307 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001308 u8 count;
1309};
1310
1311/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001312 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1313 *
1314 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1315 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001316 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1317 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1318 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1319 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001320 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1321 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1322 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1323 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001324 */
1325enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1326 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001327 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001328 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001329};
1330
1331/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001332 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1333 *
1334 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1335 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1336 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001337 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001338 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1339 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001340 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001341 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1342 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001343 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1344 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1345 * for read access.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001346 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1347 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1348 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1349 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001350 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1351 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001352 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1353 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1354 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1355 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1356 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001357 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001358 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001359 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001360 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1361 * sizeof(void *).
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001362 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001363 */
1364struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001365 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001366 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001367 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001368 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001369 bool csa_active;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001370
1371 u8 cab_queue;
1372 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1373
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001374 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1375
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001376 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1377
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001378 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001379
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001380#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1381 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1382#endif
1383
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001384 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001385 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001386};
1387
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001388static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1389{
1390#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001391 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001392#endif
1393 return false;
1394}
1395
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001396/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001397 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1398 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1399 *
1400 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1401 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1402 *
1403 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1404 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1405 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1406 */
1407struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1408
1409/**
Emmanuel Grumbachdc5a1ad2015-03-12 08:53:24 +02001410 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1411 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1412 *
1413 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1414 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1415 *
1416 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1417 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1418 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1419 */
1420struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1421
1422/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001423 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1424 *
1425 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1426 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1427 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001428 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1429 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001430 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1431 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001432 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1433 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1434 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001435 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1436 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001437 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001438 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1439 * (MFP) to be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001440 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001441 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001442 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001443 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1444 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1445 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001446 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1447 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1448 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1449 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1450 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1451 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1452 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001453 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001454 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001455 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001456 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1457 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1458 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001459 */
1460enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001461 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1462 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1463 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1464 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1465 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1466 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1467 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001468 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001469};
1470
1471/**
1472 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1473 *
1474 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1475 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1476 *
1477 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1478 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001479 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001480 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001481 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX on non-TKIP keys, may be used by the driver
1482 * as well if it needs to do software PN assignment by itself
1483 * (e.g. due to TSO)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001484 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1485 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1486 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001487 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1488 * data block:
1489 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1490 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1491 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001492 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1493 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001494 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001495struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001496 atomic64_t tx_pn;
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001497 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001498 u8 icv_len;
1499 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001500 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001501 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001502 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001503 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001504 u8 key[0];
1505};
1506
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001507#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1508
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001509/**
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001510 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1511 *
1512 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1513 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1514 * reverse order than in packet)
1515 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1516 * reverse order than in packet)
1517 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1518 * reverse order than in packet)
1519 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1520 * reverse order than in packet)
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001521 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001522 */
1523struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1524 union {
1525 struct {
1526 u32 iv32;
1527 u16 iv16;
1528 } tkip;
1529 struct {
1530 u8 pn[6];
1531 } ccmp;
1532 struct {
1533 u8 pn[6];
1534 } aes_cmac;
1535 struct {
1536 u8 pn[6];
1537 } aes_gmac;
1538 struct {
1539 u8 pn[6];
1540 } gcmp;
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001541 struct {
1542 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1543 u8 seq_len;
1544 } hw;
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001545 };
1546};
1547
1548/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001549 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1550 *
1551 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1552 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1553 *
1554 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1555 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1556 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1557 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1558 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1559 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1560 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1561 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1562 * key_idx value calculation:
1563 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1564 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1565 */
1566struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1567 u32 cipher;
1568 u16 iftype;
1569 u8 hdr_len;
1570 u8 pn_len;
1571 u8 pn_off;
1572 u8 key_idx_off;
1573 u8 key_idx_mask;
1574 u8 key_idx_shift;
1575 u8 mic_len;
1576};
1577
1578/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001579 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1580 *
1581 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1582 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1583 *
1584 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1585 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1586 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001587enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001588 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001589};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001590
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001591/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001592 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1593 *
1594 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1595 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1596 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1597 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1598 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1599 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1600 */
1601enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1602 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1603 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1604 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1605 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1606 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1607 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1608};
1609
1610/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001611 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1612 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1613 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1614 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1615 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1616 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1617 *
1618 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1619 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1620 */
1621enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1622 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1623 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1624 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1625 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1626};
1627
1628/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001629 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1630 *
1631 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001632 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001633 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1634 */
1635struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1636 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1637 struct {
1638 s8 idx;
1639 u8 count;
1640 u8 count_cts;
1641 u8 count_rts;
1642 u16 flags;
1643 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1644};
1645
1646/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001647 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1648 *
1649 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1650 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1651 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1652 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1653 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001654 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001655 *
1656 * @addr: MAC address
1657 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001658 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001659 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1660 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Johannes Berg527871d2015-03-21 08:09:55 +01001661 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1662 * otherwise always false)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001663 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1664 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001665 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1666 * if wme is supported.
1667 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001668 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001669 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1670 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1671 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1672 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001673 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001674 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001675 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001676 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1677 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001678 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001679 */
1680struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +01001681 u32 supp_rates[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001682 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1683 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001684 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001685 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001686 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001687 u8 uapsd_queues;
1688 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001689 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001690 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001691 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001692 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001693 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001694 bool tdls_initiator;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001695
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001696 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
1697
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001698 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001699 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001700};
1701
1702/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001703 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1704 *
1705 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301706 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001707 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001708 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1709 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1710 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001711enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001712 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1713};
1714
1715/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001716 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1717 *
1718 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1719 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1720 */
1721struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1722 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1723};
1724
1725/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001726 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1727 *
1728 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1729 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
1730 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue)
1731 * @ac: the AC for this queue
Johannes Bergf8bdbb52015-05-20 15:04:53 +02001732 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001733 *
1734 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1735 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1736 */
1737struct ieee80211_txq {
1738 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1739 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1740 u8 tid;
1741 u8 ac;
1742
1743 /* must be last */
1744 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1745};
1746
1747/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001748 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1749 *
1750 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1751 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1752 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1753 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1754 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1755 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001756 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1757 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1758 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1759 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1760 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1761 * algorithm.
1762 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1763 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1764 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1765 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1766 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1767 * CCK frames.
1768 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001769 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1770 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1771 * the FCS at the end.
1772 *
1773 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1774 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1775 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1776 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1777 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1778 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001779 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001780 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001781 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1782 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1783 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1784 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1785 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001786 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1787 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1788 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1789 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1790 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001791 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1792 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1793 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301794 *
1795 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1796 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001797 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001798 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1799 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1800 *
1801 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1802 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1803 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1804 *
1805 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1806 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001807 *
1808 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1809 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001810 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301811 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1812 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1813 * the stack.
1814 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001815 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001816 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1817 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001818 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001819 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1820 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1821 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001822 *
1823 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1824 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1825 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1826 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1827 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1828 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001829 *
1830 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1831 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1832 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1833 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1834 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1835 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001836 *
1837 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1838 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1839 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001840 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001841 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1842 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1843 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001844 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001845 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1846 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1847 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1848 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001849 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
1850 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
1851 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
1852 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
1853 * supported cipher suites.
1854 *
Johannes Berg17c18bf2015-03-21 15:25:43 +01001855 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
1856 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
1857 * for frames.
1858 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001859 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1860 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1861 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1862 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001863 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001864 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1865 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1866 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001867 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1868 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1869 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001870 *
1871 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1872 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001873 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001874 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1875 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1876 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1877 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001878 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1879 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1880 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1881 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02001882 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001883 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
1884 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
1885 *
Johannes Bergc526a462015-06-02 20:32:00 +02001886 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001887 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02001888 *
1889 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001890 */
1891enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02001892 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
1893 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
1894 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
1895 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
1896 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
1897 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
1898 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
1899 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
1900 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
1901 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
1902 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
1903 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
1904 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
1905 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
1906 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
1907 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
1908 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
1909 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
1910 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
1911 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
1912 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
1913 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
1914 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
1915 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
1916 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
1917 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
1918 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
1919 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
1920 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
1921
1922 /* keep last, obviously */
1923 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001924};
1925
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001926/**
1927 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001928 *
1929 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
1930 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
1931 *
1932 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
1933 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
1934 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001935 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
1936 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001937 *
1938 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
1939 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001940 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
1941 * along with this structure.
1942 *
1943 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
1944 *
1945 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
1946 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
1947 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001948 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
1949 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001950 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001951 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001952 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001953 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001954 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001955 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001956 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001957 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02001958 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
1959 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
1960 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001961 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
1962 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
1963 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001964 *
1965 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1966 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001967 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1968 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001969 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1970 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001971 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1972 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001973 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001974 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
1975 * can handle.
1976 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
1977 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001978 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04001979 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001980 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
1981 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
1982 * aggregation.
1983 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
1984 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
1985 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001986 *
1987 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
1988 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit, used by the peer as a
1989 * hint to size its reorder buffer.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001990 *
1991 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
1992 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001993 *
1994 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
1995 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
1996 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_* values, only
1997 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001998 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001999 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2000 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2001 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_* values.
2002 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002003 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
Johannes Berg680a0da2015-04-13 16:58:25 +02002004 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2005 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002006 *
2007 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2008 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2009 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2010 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2011 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2012 * neither enabled.
2013 *
2014 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2015 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2016 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002017 *
2018 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2019 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2020 * supported by HW.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002021 *
2022 * @txq_ac_max_pending: maximum number of frames per AC pending in all txq
2023 * entries for a vif.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002024 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002025struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002026 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002027 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002028 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002029 void *priv;
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002030 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002031 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002032 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002033 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002034 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002035 int chanctx_data_size;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002036 int txq_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002037 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002038 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002039 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002040 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002041 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002042 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002043 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002044 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002045 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002046 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002047 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002048 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002049 u8 uapsd_queues;
2050 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002051 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2052 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002053 int txq_ac_max_pending;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002054};
2055
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002056static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2057 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2058{
2059 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2060}
2061#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2062
2063static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2064 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2065{
2066 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2067}
2068#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2069
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002070/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002071 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2072 *
2073 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2074 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2075 */
2076struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2077 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2078
2079 /* Keep last */
2080 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2081};
2082
2083/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002084 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2085 *
2086 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2087 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2088 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2089 * @status: channel-switch response status
2090 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2091 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2092 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2093 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2094 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2095 */
2096struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2097 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2098 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2099 u8 action_code;
2100 u32 status;
2101 u32 timestamp;
2102 u16 switch_time;
2103 u16 switch_timeout;
2104 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2105 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2106};
2107
2108/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002109 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2110 *
2111 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2112 *
2113 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2114 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2115 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2116 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2117 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002118 *
2119 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002120 */
2121struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2122
2123/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002124 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2125 *
2126 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2127 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2128 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002129static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2130{
2131 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2132}
2133
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002134/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002135 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002136 *
2137 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2138 * @addr: the address to set
2139 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002140static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 *addr)
2141{
2142 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2143}
2144
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002145static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2146ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002147 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002148{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05002149 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002150 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002151 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002152}
2153
2154static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2155ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002156 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002157{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002158 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002159 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002160 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002161}
2162
2163static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2164ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002165 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002166{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002167 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002168 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002169 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002170}
2171
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002172/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01002173 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2174 * @hw: the hardware
2175 * @skb: the skb
2176 *
2177 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2178 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2179 */
2180void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2181
2182/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002183 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002184 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002185 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2186 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2187 *
2188 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2189 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002190 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2191 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2192 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002193 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2194 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2195 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002196 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2197 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2198 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2199 *
2200 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2201 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2202 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2203 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2204 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002205 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2206 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2207 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2208 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2209 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002210 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2211 *
2212 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2213 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2214 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2215 * based on the receive flags.
2216 *
2217 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2218 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2219 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2220 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002221 *
2222 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2223 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2224 * handler.
2225 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03002226 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002227 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2228 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002229 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002230 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002231 *
2232 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2233 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2234 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002235 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002236
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002237/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002238 * DOC: Powersave support
2239 *
2240 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2241 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002242 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2243 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2244 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2245 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2246 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2247 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2248 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2249 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002250 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002251 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2252 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2253 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002254 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2255 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002256 *
2257 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2258 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2259 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002260 *
2261 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2262 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2263 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2264 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002265 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2266 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002267 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002268 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002269 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2270 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2271 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2272 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2273 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2274 * periods.
2275 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002276 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002277 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2278 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2279 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2280 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2281 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2282 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2283 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2284 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2285 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2286 *
2287 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002288 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002289 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002290 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2291 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2292 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2293 *
2294 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2295 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002296 */
2297
2298/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002299 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2300 *
2301 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002302 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002303 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2304 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2305 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2306 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2307 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2308 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002309 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2310 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002311 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2312 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2313 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2314 *
2315 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2316 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2317 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2318 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2319 *
2320 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2321 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2322 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2323 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2324 * - a list of information element IDs
2325 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2326 *
2327 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2328 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2329 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2330 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2331 * vendor information elements.
2332 *
2333 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2334 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2335 *
2336 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2337 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2338 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2339 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2340 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2341 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2342 *
2343 *
2344 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2345 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2346 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2347 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2348 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2349 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2350 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2351 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2352 *
2353 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2354 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2355 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002356 */
2357
2358/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002359 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2360 *
2361 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2362 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2363 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2364 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2365 *
2366 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2367 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2368 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2369 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2370 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2371 * hardware flags.
2372 *
2373 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2374 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2375 * turned off otherwise.
2376 *
2377 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2378 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2379 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2380 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2381 */
2382
2383/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002384 * DOC: Frame filtering
2385 *
2386 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2387 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2388 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2389 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2390 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2391 *
2392 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2393 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2394 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2395 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002396 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2397 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2398 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2399 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2400 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2401 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2402 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002403 *
2404 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2405 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2406 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2407 * or dropped.
2408 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002409 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2410 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2411 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2412 * the flag, but not clear it.
2413 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2414 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2415 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2416 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2417 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2418 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2419 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2420 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002421 */
2422
2423/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002424 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2425 *
2426 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2427 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2428 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2429 *
2430 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2431 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2432 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2433 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2434 * the driver code.
2435 *
2436 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2437 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2438 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2439 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2440 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2441 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2442 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2443 *
2444 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2445 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2446 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2447 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2448 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2449 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2450 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2451 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2452 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2453 * @sta_notify callback.
2454 *
2455 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2456 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2457 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2458 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2459 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2460 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2461 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002462 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002463 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2464 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2465 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2466 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2467 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2468 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2469 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002470 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2471 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2472 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002473 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2474 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2475 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2476 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2477 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2478 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2479 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2480 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2481 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2482 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2483 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2484 *
2485 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2486 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2487 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2488 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2489 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2490 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2491 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2492 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2493 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2494 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002495 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002496 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2497 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2498 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2499 *
2500 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2501 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2502 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2503 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2504 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002505 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002506 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2507 *
2508 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2509 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2510 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2511 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002512 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002513 *
2514 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2515 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2516 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2517 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002518 */
2519
2520/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002521 * DOC: HW queue control
2522 *
2523 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2524 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2525 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2526 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2527 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2528 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2529 *
2530 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2531 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2532 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2533 *
2534 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2535 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2536 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2537 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2538 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2539 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2540 * the hardware queue.
2541 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2542 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2543 *
2544 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2545 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2546 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2547 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2548 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2549 *
2550 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2551 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2552 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2553 * off-channel queue: 9
2554 *
2555 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2556 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2557 *
2558 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2559 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2560 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2561 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2562 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2563 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2564 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2565 *
2566 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2567 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2568 *
2569 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2570 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2571 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2572 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2573 */
2574
2575/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002576 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2577 *
2578 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2579 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2580 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2581 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2582 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002583 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2584 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2585 * multicast address.
2586 *
2587 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2588 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2589 *
2590 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2591 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2592 *
2593 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2594 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2595 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2596 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2597 * honour this flag if possible.
2598 *
Johannes Bergdf140462015-04-22 14:40:58 +02002599 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
2600 * station
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002601 *
2602 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002603 *
Jakub Kicinskic2d39552015-06-02 21:10:13 +02002604 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002605 *
2606 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002607 */
2608enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002609 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2610 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2611 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2612 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2613 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2614 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002615 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002616 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002617};
2618
2619/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002620 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2621 *
2622 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2623 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002624 *
2625 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2626 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002627 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002628 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2629 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002630 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2631 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2632 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002633 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002634 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2635 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2636 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2637 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2638 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2639 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2640 * session is gone and removes the station.
2641 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2642 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2643 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2644 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002645 */
2646enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2647 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2648 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002649 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002650 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2651 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2652 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002653 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002654};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002655
2656/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002657 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2658 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002659 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2660 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002661 */
2662enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2663 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002664 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002665};
2666
2667/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002668 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2669 *
2670 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002671 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2672 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2673 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002674 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002675 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2676 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2677 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002678 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2679 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002680 */
2681enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2682 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2683 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002684 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002685 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002686};
2687
2688/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002689 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2690 *
2691 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2692 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2693 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2694 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2695 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2696 *
2697 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2698 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2699 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2700 */
2701enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2702 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2703 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2704};
2705
2706/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002707 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2708 *
2709 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2710 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2711 *
2712 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2713 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2714 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2715 * of wowlan configuration)
2716 */
2717enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2718 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2719 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2720};
2721
2722/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002723 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2724 *
2725 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2726 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2727 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2728 *
2729 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2730 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2731 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002732 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002733 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002734 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002735 *
2736 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2737 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2738 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2739 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2740 * or zero.
2741 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2742 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2743 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002744 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002745 *
2746 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2747 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2748 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2749 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002750 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2751 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002752 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002753 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002754 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2755 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2756 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2757 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2758 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002759 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2760 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2761 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2762 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002763 *
2764 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2765 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2766 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2767 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2768 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2769 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002770 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2771 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2772 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2773 * in suspend().
2774 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002775 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002776 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002777 * and @stop must be implemented.
2778 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2779 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2780 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2781 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2782 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002783 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002784 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002785 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2786 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2787 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2788 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2789 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2790 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002791 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2792 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2793 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2794 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2795 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2796 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
2797 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002798 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002799 *
2800 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
2801 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002802 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002803 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002804 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002805 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
2806 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
2807 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
2808 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
2809 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002810 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
2811 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002812 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002813 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
2814 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
2815 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
2816 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002817 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
2818 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002819 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002820 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07002821 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002822 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002823 *
2824 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002825 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
2826 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002827 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002828 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002829 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002830 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002831 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
2832 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
2833 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02002834 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002835 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002836 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
2837 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
2838 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
2839 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
2840 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
2841 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002842 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
2843 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
2844 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
2845 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002846 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002847 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02002848 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
2849 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a542009-04-01 11:58:36 +02002850 * that power save is disabled.
2851 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
2852 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
2853 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
2854 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
2855 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
2856 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
2857 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002858 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002859 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002860 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
2861 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
2862 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
2863 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
2864 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
2865 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
2866 * The callback can sleep.
2867 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002868 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
2869 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
2870 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
2871 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
2872 *
2873 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01002874 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002875 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002876 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
2877 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02002878 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
2879 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
2880 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002881 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002882 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
2883 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
2884 * this notification.
2885 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002886 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002887 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
2888 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002889 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002890 *
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02002891 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
2892 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
2893 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002894 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002895 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002896 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
2897 * if the device does fragmentation by itself; if this callback is
2898 * implemented then the stack will not do fragmentation.
2899 * The callback can sleep.
2900 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002901 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002902 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002903 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002904 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
2905 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
2906 *
2907 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002908 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
2909 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
2910 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
2911 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2912 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002913 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302914 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
2915 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
2916 * and @sta_remove_debugfs should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2917 * conditional. This callback can sleep.
2918 *
2919 * @sta_remove_debugfs: Remove the debugfs files which were added using
2920 * @sta_add_debugfs. This callback can sleep.
2921 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002922 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02002923 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
2924 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
2925 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01002926 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002927 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
2928 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
2929 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
2930 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002931 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
2932 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
2933 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
2934 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2935 * The callback can sleep.
2936 *
2937 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
2938 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
2939 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
2940 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
2941 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002942 * The callback can sleep.
2943 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002944 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
2945 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
2946 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
2947 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
2948 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
2949 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
2950 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01002951 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
2952 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
2953 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002954 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01002955 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
2956 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
2957 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
2958 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
2959 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
2960 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
2961 * The callback can sleep.
2962 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002963 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02002964 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002965 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002966 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002967 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002968 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002969 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002970 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002971 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002972 *
2973 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002974 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002975 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002976 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002977 *
2978 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
2979 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
2980 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
2981 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002982 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002983 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002984 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
2985 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
2986 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002987 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002988 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02002989 *
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002990 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
2991 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
2992 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
2993 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. Starting sequence number (@ssn)
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002994 * is the first frame we expect to perform the action on. Notice
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002995 * that TX/RX_STOP can pass NULL for this parameter.
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01002996 * The @buf_size parameter is only valid when the action is set to
2997 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL and indicates the peer's reorder
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02002998 * buffer size (number of subframes) for this session -- the driver
2999 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than this
3000 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3001 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3002 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3003 * - TX: 1.....7
3004 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
3005 * - TX: 8..1...
3006 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3007 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3008 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
3009 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3010 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003011 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Johannes Berg85ad1812010-06-10 10:21:49 +02003012 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003013 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07003014 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3015 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003016 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3017 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3018 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003019 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003020 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003021 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3022 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003023 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3024 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3025 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003026 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003027 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3028 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003029 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01003030 *
3031 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003032 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3033 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3034 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3035 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003036 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003037 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003038 *
3039 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3040 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3041 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3042 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003043 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09003044 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3045 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3046 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3047 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3048 *
3049 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003050 *
3051 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3052 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3053 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3054 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3055 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3056 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003057 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003058 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3059 * must be accepted in this case.
3060 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003061 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3062 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003063 *
3064 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3065 *
3066 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303067 *
3068 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3069 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303070 *
3071 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3072 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3073 * The callback can sleep.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003074 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3075 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +03003076 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003077 *
3078 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3079 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3080 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3081 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09003082 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003083 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3084 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3085 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3086 * more-data bit must always be set.
3087 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3088 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +02003089 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3090 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3091 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3092 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3093 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3094 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003095 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3096 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3097 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003098 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3099 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003100 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003101 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003102 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003103 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3104 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3105 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01003106 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003107 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3108 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3109 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3110 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003111 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003112 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003113 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3114 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3115 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003116 *
3117 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3118 *
3119 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3120 *
3121 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3122 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3123 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003124 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3125 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3126 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3127 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3128 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3129 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3130 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3131 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3132 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3133 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3134 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3135 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003136 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003137 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3138 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3139 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3140 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3141 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3142 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3143 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3144 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3145 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003146 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3147 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3148 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3149 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3150 * channel context with different settings
3151 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3152 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3153 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3154 * unbound from vif.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003155 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3156 * another, as specified in the list of
3157 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3158 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3159 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003160 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3161 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3162 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3163 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3164 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3165 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3166 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003167 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003168 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3169 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3170 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3171 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3172 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01003173 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003174 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3175 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3176 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003177 *
3178 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3179 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3180 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003181 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003182 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3183 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003184 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003185 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003186 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3187 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003188 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3189 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3190 * gets a CSA or an userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3191 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003192 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3193 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3194 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003195 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003196 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3197 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3198 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3199 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003200 *
3201 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3202 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3203 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003204 *
3205 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3206 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003207 *
3208 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3209 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3210 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3211 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3212 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3213 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3214 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3215 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3216 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003217 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3218 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3219 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3220 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3221 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3222 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3223 * the function call.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003224 *
3225 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003226 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003227struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02003228 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3229 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3230 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003231 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003232 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003233#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3234 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3235 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02003236 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003237#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003238 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003239 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003240 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3241 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003242 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003243 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003244 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003245 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003246 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3247 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3248 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3249 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003250
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003251 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3252 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3253
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003254 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003255 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003256 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3257 unsigned int changed_flags,
3258 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003259 u64 multicast);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003260 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3261 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003262 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003263 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003264 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003265 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003266 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3267 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3268 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3269 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003270 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3271 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3272 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003273 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3274 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003275 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003276 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003277 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3278 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003279 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3280 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3281 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003282 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003283 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003284 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003285 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3286 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3287 const u8 *mac_addr);
3288 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3289 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003290 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3291 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003292 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3293 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3294 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003295 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003296 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003297 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3298 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3299 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3300 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303301#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3302 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3303 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3304 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3305 struct dentry *dir);
3306 void (*sta_remove_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3307 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3308 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3309 struct dentry *dir);
3310#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003311 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003312 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003313 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3314 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3315 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3316 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003317 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3318 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3319 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003320 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3321 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3322 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3323 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003324 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3325 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3326 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003327 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3328 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3329 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3330 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003331 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003332 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003333 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003334 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3335 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3336 u64 tsf);
3337 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003338 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003339 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003340 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003341 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action,
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01003342 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, u16 *ssn,
3343 u8 buf_size);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003344 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3345 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003346 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003347 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003348#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003349 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3350 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003351 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3352 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3353 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003354#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003355 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3356 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003357 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003358 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003359 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003360 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3361 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003362
3363 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003364 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003365 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003366 int duration,
3367 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003368 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003369 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3370 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3371 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303372 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303373 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3374 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003375 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3376 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3377 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003378
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003379 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3380 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3381 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3382 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3383 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003384 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3385 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3386 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3387 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3388 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003389
3390 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3391 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3392 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3393 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3394 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3395 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3396 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3397 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003398
3399 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3400 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003401
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003402 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3403 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3404
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003405 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3406 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3407 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3408 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3409 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3410 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3411 u32 changed);
3412 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3413 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3414 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3415 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3416 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3417 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003418 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3419 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3420 int n_vifs,
3421 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003422
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003423 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3424 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003425
3426#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3427 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3428 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3429 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3430#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003431 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3432 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3433 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003434 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3435 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3436 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003437
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003438 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3439 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3440
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003441 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3442 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003443 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003444 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3445 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003446
3447 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3448 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3449 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3450 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003451 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003452 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3453 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3454 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003455 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3456 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3457 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003458
3459 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3460 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003461};
3462
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003463/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003464 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3465 *
3466 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3467 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3468 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3469 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3470 * @priv_data_len.
3471 *
3472 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3473 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3474 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3475 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3476 *
3477 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3478 */
3479struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3480 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3481 const char *requested_name);
3482
3483/**
3484 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003485 *
3486 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3487 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3488 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3489 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3490 * @priv_data_len.
3491 *
3492 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3493 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003494 *
3495 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003496 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003497static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003498struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003499 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3500{
3501 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3502}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003503
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003504/**
3505 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3506 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003507 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3508 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3509 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003510 *
3511 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003512 *
3513 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003514 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003515int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3516
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003517/**
3518 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3519 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3520 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3521 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3522 */
3523struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3524 int throughput;
3525 int blink_time;
3526};
3527
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003528/**
3529 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3530 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3531 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3532 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3533 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3534 */
3535enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3536 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3537 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3538 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3539};
3540
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003541#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003542const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3543const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3544const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3545const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3546const char *
3547__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3548 unsigned int flags,
3549 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3550 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003551#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003552/**
3553 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3554 *
3555 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3556 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3557 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3558 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3559 *
3560 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003561 *
3562 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003563 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003564static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003565{
3566#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3567 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3568#else
3569 return NULL;
3570#endif
3571}
3572
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003573/**
3574 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3575 *
3576 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3577 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3578 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3579 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3580 *
3581 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003582 *
3583 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003584 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003585static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003586{
3587#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3588 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3589#else
3590 return NULL;
3591#endif
3592}
3593
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003594/**
3595 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3596 *
3597 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3598 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3599 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3600 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3601 *
3602 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003603 *
3604 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003605 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003606static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003607{
3608#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3609 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3610#else
3611 return NULL;
3612#endif
3613}
3614
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003615/**
3616 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3617 *
3618 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3619 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3620 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3621 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3622 *
3623 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003624 *
3625 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003626 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003627static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003628{
3629#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3630 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3631#else
3632 return NULL;
3633#endif
3634}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003635
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003636/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003637 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3638 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003639 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003640 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3641 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3642 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003643 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3644 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3645 *
3646 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003647 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003648static inline const char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003649ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003650 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3651 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3652{
3653#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003654 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003655 blink_table_len);
3656#else
3657 return NULL;
3658#endif
3659}
3660
3661/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003662 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3663 *
3664 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3665 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3666 *
3667 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3668 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003669void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3670
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003671/**
3672 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3673 *
3674 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3675 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003676 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003677 *
3678 * @hw: the hardware to free
3679 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003680void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3681
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003682/**
3683 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3684 *
3685 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3686 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3687 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3688 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3689 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3690 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3691 *
3692 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3693 */
3694void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3695
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003696/**
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003697 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003698 *
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003699 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
3700 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3701 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3702 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3703 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
3704 *
3705 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3706 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3707 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
3708 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3709 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
3710 *
3711 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
3712 *
3713 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3714 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3715 * @napi: the NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003716 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003717void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3718 struct napi_struct *napi);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003719
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003720/**
3721 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3722 *
3723 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b32010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003724 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3725 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3726 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3727 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003728 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003729 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003730 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3731 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003732 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3733 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003734 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003735 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02003736 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003737 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3738 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003739 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003740static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
3741{
3742 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, skb, NULL);
3743}
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003744
3745/**
3746 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
3747 *
3748 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003749 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3750 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003751 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003752 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
3753 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003754 *
3755 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3756 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003757 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02003758void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003759
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003760/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003761 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
3762 *
3763 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
3764 * (internally disables bottom halves).
3765 *
3766 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003767 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3768 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003769 *
3770 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3771 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3772 */
3773static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3774 struct sk_buff *skb)
3775{
3776 local_bh_disable();
3777 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
3778 local_bh_enable();
3779}
3780
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003781/**
3782 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
3783 *
3784 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
3785 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
3786 * entering/leaving PS mode.
3787 *
3788 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
3789 *
3790 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
3791 * each other.
3792 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003793 * @sta: currently connected sta
3794 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003795 *
3796 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003797 */
3798int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
3799
3800/**
3801 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
3802 * (in process context)
3803 *
3804 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
3805 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
3806 * applies.
3807 *
3808 * @sta: currently connected sta
3809 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003810 *
3811 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003812 */
3813static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3814 bool start)
3815{
3816 int ret;
3817
3818 local_bh_disable();
3819 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
3820 local_bh_enable();
3821
3822 return ret;
3823}
3824
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003825/*
3826 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
3827 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
3828 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02003829#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003830
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003831/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003832 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07003833 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003834 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
3835 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003836 *
3837 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003838 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
3839 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003840 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003841 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
3842 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
3843 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
3844 * call! Beware of the locking!)
3845 *
3846 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
3847 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
3848 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
3849 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
3850 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
3851 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
3852 *
3853 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
3854 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
3855 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
3856 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
3857 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003858 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003859void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3860 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003861
3862/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02003863 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
3864 *
3865 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
3866 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
3867 * rate selection table for the station entry.
3868 *
3869 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3870 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
3871 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
3872 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
3873 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
3874 */
3875void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3876 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3877 struct sk_buff *skb,
3878 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
3879 int max_rates);
3880
3881/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003882 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
3883 *
3884 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
3885 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
3886 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
3887 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003888 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3889 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003890 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003891 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3892 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003893 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003894 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3895 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003896 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003897void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003898 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003899
3900/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01003901 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
3902 *
3903 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
3904 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
3905 * specific skbs.
3906 *
3907 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
3908 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
3909 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
3910 *
3911 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3912 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
3913 * (NULL for multicast packets)
3914 * @info: tx status information
3915 */
3916void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3917 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3918 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
3919
3920/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003921 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
3922 *
3923 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
3924 *
3925 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3926 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
3927 * for a single hardware.
3928 *
3929 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3930 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
3931 */
3932static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3933 struct sk_buff *skb)
3934{
3935 local_bh_disable();
3936 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
3937 local_bh_enable();
3938}
3939
3940/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003941 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003942 *
3943 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
3944 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3945 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003946 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3947 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003948 *
3949 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3950 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003951 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003952void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003953 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003954
3955/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003956 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
3957 *
3958 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
3959 * connected STA.
3960 *
3961 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
3962 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
3963 */
3964void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
3965
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003966#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
3967
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003968/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003969 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
3970 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
3971 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03003972 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
3973 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
3974 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003975 */
3976struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
3977 u16 tim_offset;
3978 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003979
3980 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003981};
3982
3983/**
3984 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
3985 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3986 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3987 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
3988 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
3989 *
3990 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
3991 * obtain the beacon template.
3992 *
3993 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
3994 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003995 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
3996 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003997 *
3998 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
3999 *
4000 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4001 */
4002struct sk_buff *
4003ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4004 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4005 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4006
4007/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004008 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4009 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004010 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004011 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4012 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4013 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4014 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4015 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4016 *
4017 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004018 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004019 *
4020 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4021 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004022 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4023 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004024 *
4025 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004026 *
4027 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004028 */
4029struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4030 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4031 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4032
4033/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004034 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4035 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004036 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004037 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004038 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004039 *
4040 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004041 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004042static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4043 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4044{
4045 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4046}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004047
4048/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004049 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4050 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4051 *
4052 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4053 * This function is called implicitly when
4054 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4055 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4056 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4057 *
4058 * Return: new csa counter value
4059 */
4060u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4061
4062/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004063 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4064 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4065 *
4066 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004067 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004068 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4069 */
4070void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4071
4072/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004073 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004074 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4075 *
4076 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4077 */
4078bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4079
4080
4081/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004082 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4083 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4084 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4085 *
4086 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4087 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4088 *
4089 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004090 *
4091 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004092 */
4093struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4094 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4095
4096/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004097 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4098 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4099 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4100 *
4101 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4102 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4103 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4104 *
4105 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4106 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004107 *
4108 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004109 */
4110struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4111 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4112
4113/**
4114 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4115 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4116 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4117 *
4118 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4119 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4120 * BSSID and address is used.
4121 *
4122 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4123 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004124 *
4125 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004126 */
4127struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4128 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4129
4130/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004131 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4132 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004133 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004134 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4135 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004136 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004137 *
4138 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4139 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004140 *
4141 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004142 */
4143struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004144 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004145 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004146 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004147
4148/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004149 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4150 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004151 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004152 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4153 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004154 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004155 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4156 *
4157 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4158 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4159 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4160 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4161 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004162void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004163 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004164 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004165 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4166
4167/**
4168 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4169 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004170 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004171 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004172 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004173 *
4174 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4175 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4176 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004177 *
4178 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004179 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004180__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4181 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004182 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004183
4184/**
4185 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4186 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004187 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004188 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4189 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004190 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004191 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4192 *
4193 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4194 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4195 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4196 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4197 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004198void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4199 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004200 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004201 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004202 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4203
4204/**
4205 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4206 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004207 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004208 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004209 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004210 *
4211 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4212 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4213 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004214 *
4215 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004216 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004217__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4218 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004219 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004220 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004221
4222/**
4223 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4224 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004225 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02004226 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004227 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004228 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004229 *
4230 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4231 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004232 *
4233 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004234 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004235__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4236 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Michal Kazior4ee73f32012-04-11 08:47:56 +02004237 enum ieee80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004238 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004239 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004240
4241/**
4242 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4243 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004244 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004245 *
4246 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4247 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4248 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4249 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004250 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4251 *
4252 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4253 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004254 *
4255 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4256 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4257 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4258 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4259 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4260 * use common code for all beacons.
4261 */
4262struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004263ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004264
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004265/**
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004266 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4267 *
4268 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4269 *
4270 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4271 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4272 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4273 */
4274void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4275 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4276
4277/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004278 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004279 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004280 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4281 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004282 *
4283 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004284 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4285 * with this P1K
4286 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004287 */
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004288static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4289 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4290{
4291 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4292 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4293 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4294
4295 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4296}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004297
4298/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004299 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4300 *
4301 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4302 * and transmitter address.
4303 *
4304 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4305 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4306 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4307 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4308 */
4309void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4310 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4311
4312/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004313 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4314 *
4315 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4316 * in the packet.
4317 *
4318 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4319 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4320 * encrypted with this key
4321 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4322 */
4323void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4324 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004325
4326/**
Assaf Krauss5d0d04e2012-08-01 15:12:48 +03004327 * ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2 - calculate the AES-CMAC sub keys
4328 *
4329 * This function computes the two AES-CMAC sub-keys, based on the
4330 * previously installed master key.
4331 *
4332 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4333 * @k1: a buffer to be filled with the 1st sub-key
4334 * @k2: a buffer to be filled with the 2nd sub-key
4335 */
4336void ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4337 u8 *k1, u8 *k2);
4338
4339/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004340 * ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq - get key TX sequence counter
4341 *
4342 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4343 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4344 *
4345 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current TX IV/PN
4346 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV generation is
4347 * offloaded to the device.
4348 *
4349 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
4350 * can be done concurrently, for example when queues are stopped
4351 * and the stop has been synchronized.
4352 */
4353void ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4354 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4355
4356/**
4357 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4358 *
4359 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004360 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004361 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4362 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4363 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4364 *
4365 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4366 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4367 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4368 *
4369 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4370 * can be done concurrently.
4371 */
4372void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4373 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4374
4375/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004376 * ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq - set key TX sequence counter
4377 *
4378 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4379 * @seq: new sequence data
4380 *
4381 * This function allows a driver to set the current TX IV/PNs for the
4382 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and the
4383 * device may have transmitted frames using the PTK, e.g. replies to
4384 * ARP requests.
4385 *
4386 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
4387 * can be done concurrently.
4388 */
4389void ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4390 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4391
4392/**
4393 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4394 *
4395 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004396 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004397 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4398 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4399 * @seq: new sequence data
4400 *
4401 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4402 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4403 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4404 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4405 *
4406 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4407 * can be done concurrently.
4408 */
4409void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4410 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4411
4412/**
4413 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4414 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4415 *
4416 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4417 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4418 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4419 *
4420 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4421 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4422 */
4423void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4424
4425/**
4426 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4427 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4428 * @keyconf: new key data
4429 *
4430 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4431 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4432 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4433 *
4434 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4435 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4436 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4437 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4438 *
4439 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4440 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4441 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4442 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4443 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4444 * of the reconfiguration.
4445 *
4446 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4447 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4448 *
4449 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4450 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4451 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4452 * the key that's being replaced.
4453 */
4454struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4455ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4456 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4457
4458/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004459 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4460 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4461 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4462 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4463 * @gfp: allocation flags
4464 */
4465void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4466 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4467
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004468/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004469 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4470 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4471 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4472 *
4473 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4474 */
4475void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4476
4477/**
4478 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4479 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4480 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4481 *
4482 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4483 */
4484void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4485
4486/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004487 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4488 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4489 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4490 *
4491 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004492 *
4493 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004494 */
4495
4496int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4497
4498/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004499 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4500 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4501 *
4502 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4503 */
4504void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4505
4506/**
4507 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4508 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4509 *
4510 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4511 */
4512void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4513
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004514/**
4515 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4516 *
4517 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4518 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004519 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4520 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004521 *
4522 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004523 * @aborted: set to true if scan was aborted
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004524 */
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004525void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool aborted);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004526
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004527/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004528 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4529 *
4530 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4531 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4532 *
4533 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4534 */
4535void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4536
4537/**
4538 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4539 *
4540 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4541 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4542 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4543 * while associating, for instance.
4544 *
4545 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4546 */
4547void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4548
4549/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004550 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4551 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4552 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4553 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4554 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4555 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4556 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4557 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004558 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004559 */
4560enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4561 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4562 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004563 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004564};
4565
4566/**
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004567 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
4568 *
4569 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4570 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
4571 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
4572 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4573 *
4574 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4575 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4576 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
4577 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4578 */
4579void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4580 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4581 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4582 void *data);
4583
4584/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004585 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004586 *
4587 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4588 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004589 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4590 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4591 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004592 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004593 *
4594 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004595 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004596 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004597 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4598 */
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004599static inline void
4600ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4601 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4602 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4603 void *data)
4604{
4605 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
4606 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
4607 iterator, data);
4608}
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004609
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004610/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004611 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4612 *
4613 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4614 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4615 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4616 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004617 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004618 *
4619 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004620 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004621 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4622 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4623 */
4624void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004625 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004626 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4627 u8 *mac,
4628 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4629 void *data);
4630
4631/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004632 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4633 *
4634 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4635 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4636 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4637 *
4638 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4639 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4640 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4641 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4642 */
4643void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4644 u32 iter_flags,
4645 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4646 u8 *mac,
4647 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4648 void *data);
4649
4650/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03004651 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
4652 *
4653 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
4654 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
4655 * function for them.
4656 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4657 *
4658 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4659 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4660 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4661 */
4662void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4663 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4664 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
4665 void *data);
4666/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004667 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4668 *
4669 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4670 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4671 *
4672 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4673 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4674 */
4675void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4676
4677/**
4678 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4679 *
4680 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4681 * workqueue.
4682 *
4683 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4684 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4685 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4686 */
4687void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4688 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4689 unsigned long delay);
4690
4691/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004692 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004693 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004694 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304695 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004696 *
4697 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004698 *
4699 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4700 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4701 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4702 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304703int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4704 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004705
4706/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004707 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004708 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004709 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4710 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4711 *
4712 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004713 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4714 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004715 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004716void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004717 u16 tid);
4718
4719/**
4720 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004721 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004722 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004723 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004724 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004725 *
4726 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4727 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4728 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4729 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004730int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004731
4732/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004733 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004734 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004735 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4736 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4737 *
4738 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004739 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4740 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004741 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004742void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004743 u16 tid);
4744
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07004745/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004746 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
4747 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004748 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004749 * @addr: station's address
4750 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004751 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4752 *
4753 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004754 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4755 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004756struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004757 const u8 *addr);
4758
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004759/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004760 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004761 *
4762 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004763 * @addr: remote station's address
4764 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004765 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004766 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4767 *
4768 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004769 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4770 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004771 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
4772 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
4773 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
4774 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
4775 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
4776 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
4777 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004778 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004779 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004780 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004781struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4782 const u8 *addr,
4783 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004784
4785/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01004786 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
4787 * @hw: the hardware
4788 * @pubsta: the station
4789 * @block: whether to block or unblock
4790 *
4791 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
4792 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
4793 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
4794 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
4795 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
4796 *
4797 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
4798 * manner.
4799 *
4800 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
4801 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
4802 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
4803 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
4804 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
4805 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
4806 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
4807 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
4808 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
4809 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
4810 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
4811 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
4812 * woke up while blocked or not.
4813 */
4814void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4815 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
4816
4817/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004818 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
4819 * @pubsta: the station
4820 *
4821 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
4822 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
4823 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
4824 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
4825 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004826 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
4827 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
4828 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
4829 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
4830 *
4831 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
4832 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
4833 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
4834 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004835 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004836void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004837
4838/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004839 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
4840 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4841 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
4842 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
4843 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
4844 *
4845 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
4846 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
4847 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
4848 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
4849 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
4850 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02004851 *
4852 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
4853 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
4854 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004855 */
4856void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4857 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4858 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4859 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4860 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4861 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4862 void *data),
4863 void *iter_data);
4864
4865/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004866 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
4867 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4868 * @iter: iterator function
4869 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
4870 *
4871 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
4872 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
4873 * places while calling into the driver.
4874 *
4875 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
4876 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
4877 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01004878 *
4879 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
4880 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
4881 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
4882 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004883 */
4884void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
4885 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4886 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4887 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
4888 void *data),
4889 void *iter_data);
4890
4891/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004892 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4893 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4894 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4895 *
4896 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4897 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
4898 * information. This function must only be called from within the
4899 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
4900 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004901 * %NULL.
4902 *
4903 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004904 */
4905struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4906 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4907
4908/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004909 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
4910 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004911 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004912 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004913 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004914 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004915 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
4916 */
4917void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004918
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004919/**
4920 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
4921 *
4922 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4923 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004924 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004925 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
4926 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01004927 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
4928 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004929 *
4930 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
4931 * without connection recovery attempts.
4932 */
4933void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4934
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004935/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02004936 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
4937 *
4938 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4939 *
4940 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
4941 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
4942 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
4943 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
4944 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
4945 *
4946 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
4947 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
4948 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
4949 * disconnect normally later.
4950 *
4951 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
4952 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
4953 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
4954 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
4955 */
4956void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4957
4958/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004959 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
4960 * rssi threshold triggered
4961 *
4962 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4963 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
4964 * @gfp: context flags
4965 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01004966 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004967 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
4968 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
4969 */
4970void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4971 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
4972 gfp_t gfp);
4973
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004974/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01004975 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
4976 *
4977 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4978 * @gfp: context flags
4979 */
4980void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
4981
4982/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01004983 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
4984 *
4985 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4986 */
4987void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4988
4989/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004990 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
4991 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4992 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
4993 *
4994 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
4995 * and wake up the suspended queues.
4996 */
4997void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
4998
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004999/**
5000 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5001 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02005002 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005003 *
5004 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5005 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5006 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5007 */
5008void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5009 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5010
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02005011/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01005012 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5013 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5014 */
5015void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5016
5017/**
5018 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5019 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5020 */
5021void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5022
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03005023/**
5024 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5025 *
5026 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5027 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5028 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5029 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5030 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5031 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5032 *
5033 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5034 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5035 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5036 */
5037void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5038 const u8 *addr);
5039
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005040/**
5041 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5042 *
5043 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5044 * buffer.
5045 *
5046 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5047 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5048 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5049 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5050 */
5051void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5052
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005053/**
5054 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5055 *
5056 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5057 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5058 * reordering.
5059 *
5060 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5061 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5062 *
5063 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5064 * @addr: station mac address
5065 * @tid: the rx tid
5066 */
5067void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5068 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5069
5070/**
5071 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5072 *
5073 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5074 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5075 * reordering.
5076 *
5077 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5078 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5079 *
5080 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5081 * @addr: station mac address
5082 * @tid: the rx tid
5083 */
5084void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5085 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5086
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005087/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005088
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005089/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005090 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005091 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005092 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5093 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5094 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005095 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5096 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005097 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5098 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5099 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5100 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5101 * RTS threshold
5102 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5103 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005104 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005105 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
5106 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005107 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005108 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005109 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005110 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005111struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5112 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5113 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5114 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5115 struct sk_buff *skb;
5116 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5117 bool rts, short_preamble;
5118 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005119 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005120 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005121 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005122};
5123
5124struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005125 const char *name;
5126 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005127 void (*free)(void *priv);
5128
5129 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5130 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005131 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005132 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05305133 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005134 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02005135 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5136 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005137 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5138 void *priv_sta);
5139
Felix Fietkauf6845652014-11-19 20:08:08 +01005140 void (*tx_status_noskb)(void *priv,
5141 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5142 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5143 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005144 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5145 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5146 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005147 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5148 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005149
5150 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5151 struct dentry *dir);
5152 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02005153
5154 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005155};
5156
5157static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5158 enum ieee80211_band band,
5159 int index)
5160{
5161 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5162}
5163
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07005164/**
5165 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5166 *
5167 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5168 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5169 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5170 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5171 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5172 * not null.
5173 *
5174 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5175 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5176 *
5177 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5178 * that this may be null.
5179 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5180 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5181 */
5182bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5183 void *priv_sta,
5184 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5185
5186
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005187static inline s8
5188rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5189 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5190{
5191 int i;
5192
5193 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5194 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5195 return i;
5196
5197 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005198 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005199
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005200 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005201 return 0;
5202}
5203
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07005204static inline
5205bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5206 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5207{
5208 unsigned int i;
5209
5210 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5211 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5212 return true;
5213 return false;
5214}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005215
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02005216/**
5217 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5218 *
5219 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5220 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5221 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5222 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5223 *
5224 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5225 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5226 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5227 */
5228int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5229 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5230 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5231
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01005232int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5233void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005234
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005235static inline bool
5236conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5237{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005238 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005239}
5240
5241static inline bool
5242conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5243{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005244 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5245 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005246}
5247
5248static inline bool
5249conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5250{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005251 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5252 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005253}
5254
5255static inline bool
5256conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5257{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005258 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005259}
5260
5261static inline bool
5262conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5263{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005264 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5265 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5266 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005267}
5268
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005269static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5270ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5271{
5272 if (p2p) {
5273 switch (type) {
5274 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5275 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5276 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5277 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5278 default:
5279 break;
5280 }
5281 }
5282 return type;
5283}
5284
5285static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5286ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5287{
5288 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5289}
5290
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005291void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5292 int rssi_min_thold,
5293 int rssi_max_thold);
5294
5295void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005296
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005297/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005298 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005299 *
5300 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5301 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005302 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5303 *
5304 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5305 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005306 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005307int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5308
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005309/**
5310 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5311 * @vif: virtual interface
5312 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5313 * @gfp: allocation flags
5314 *
5315 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5316 */
5317void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5318 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5319 gfp_t gfp);
5320
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005321/**
5322 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5323 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5324 * @vif: virtual interface
5325 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5326 * @band: the band to transmit on
5327 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5328 *
5329 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5330 */
5331bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5332 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5333 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5334
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005335/**
5336 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5337 *
5338 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5339 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5340 *
5341 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5342 *
5343 * private:
5344 *
5345 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5346 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5347 */
5348struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5349 u32 next_tsf;
5350 bool has_next_tsf;
5351
5352 u8 absent;
5353
5354 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5355 struct {
5356 u32 start;
5357 u32 duration;
5358 u32 interval;
5359 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5360};
5361
5362/**
5363 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5364 *
5365 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5366 * @data: NoA tracking data
5367 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5368 *
5369 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5370 */
5371int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5372 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5373
5374/**
5375 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5376 *
5377 * @data: NoA tracking data
5378 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5379 */
5380void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5381
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005382/**
5383 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5384 * @vif: virtual interface
5385 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5386 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5387 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5388 * @gfp: allocation flags
5389 *
5390 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5391 */
5392void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5393 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5394 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005395
5396/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005397 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5398 *
5399 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5400 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5401 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5402 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5403 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5404 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5405 *
5406 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5407 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5408 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5409 *
5410 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5411 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5412 *
5413 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5414 */
5415int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5416
5417/**
5418 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5419 *
5420 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5421 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5422 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5423 *
5424 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5425 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5426 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5427 *
5428 * @sta: the station
5429 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5430 */
5431void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5432
5433/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01005434 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
5435 *
5436 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5437 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5438 *
5439 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
5440 */
5441struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5442 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005443#endif /* MAC80211_H */